PE-Stamped Plans Included|Design Online in 3D|Financing from $89/mo

Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings For Sale

Commercial shops, industrial warehouses, farm buildings and specialty structures from $14,500. Cold-formed galvanized steel frames ship with PE-stamped engineered drawings tailored to your local wind speed and snow load requirements. Every Steel and Stud order includes free nationwide delivery. Widths from 30 to 100+ feet, lengths to 200+ feet, column-free interiors or multi-bay layouts.

Design in 3D — Free Get a Free Quote

$14,500

STARTING PRICE

13+

BUILDING TYPES

200ft

MAX CLEAR SPAN

STATES COVERED

Factory-Direct Pricing

20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge

A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004

Free Delivery — All 48 States

Free Professional Installation Included

RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo

Balance Due After Install — Not Before

35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Factory-Direct Pricing

20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge

A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004

Free Delivery — All 48 States

Free Professional Installation Included

RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo

Balance Due After Install — Not Before

35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

26×50 Metal Carport (Open)

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Pre-engineered 26×50 steel building delivers 1,300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

26×50 Metal Carport (Open) | Steel and Stud, From $16,450

26×50 Metal Carport (Open)

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$18,750$16,450SAVE $2,300

or $343/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›Metal Carport (Open)

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Metal Carport (Open) hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Metal Carport (Open), built for daily backyard use.

Our 26×50 metal carport (open) fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Open 26×50 steel carport for vehicles, trailers, boats, tractors, and.

You’re viewing:Metal Carport (Open)·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$16,450$18,750Save $2,300

or as low as $343/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$16,450

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
From $8,495
3 Roof Styles
Free Install
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-METAL-CARPORT-OPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-cover layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Our 26×50 metal carport (open) fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Cover bay · Pillar zone · Approach apron

Cover bay at the front, pillar zone in the middle, approach apron at the rear. Open 26×50 steel carport for vehicles, trailers, boats, tractors, and equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Carport (Open) at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Metal Carport (Open) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport (Open).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport (Open) spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport (Open).

DAILY USE

Everyday metal carport (open)

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport (open).

STORAGE OVERFLOW metal carport (open) + seasonal storage

metal carport (open) + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Metal Carport (Open), what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$343/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 metal carport (open) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $343/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport (Open) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Metal Carport (Open) buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Metal Carport (Open)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Metal Carport (Open) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 metal carport (open) cost?

A 26×50 metal carport (open) from Steel and Stud starts at $16,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $343/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 metal carport (open) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal carport (open) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 metal carport (open)?

Almost always for 1,300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport (open) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 26×50 metal carport (open) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 26×50 metal carport (open) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 26×50 metal carport (open) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $343/month on a 26×50 metal carport (open).

What warranty comes with the 26×50 metal carport (open)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 26×50 metal carport (open) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 26×50 metal carport (open) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 26×50 metal carport (open) typically adds $10,400–$15,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport (Open) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 Metal Carport (Open)

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space | Steel and Stud, From $16,450

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$18,750$16,450SAVE $2,300

or $343/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›Workshop / Hobby Space

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Workshop / Hobby Space hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 26×50 workshop / hobby space? At 1300 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. A 1,1300 sq ft clear-span workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Space·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$16,450$18,750Save $2,300

or as low as $343/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$16,450

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
From style=”margin-top:18px”3,995
Clear Span
14 Gauge
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Looking for a 26×50 workshop / hobby space? At 1300 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. A 1,1300 sq ft clear-span workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, fabrication, equipment repair, and hobby projects.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Space.

DAILY USE

Everyday workshop / hobby space

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby space.

STORAGE OVERFLOW workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage

workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$343/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 workshop / hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $343/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 workshop / hobby space cost?

A 26×50 workshop / hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $16,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $343/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 workshop / hobby space price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 workshop / hobby space?

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 26×50 workshop / hobby space need?

How fast can I get a 26×50 workshop / hobby space delivered?

Can I finance a 26×50 workshop / hobby space without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 26×50 workshop / hobby space?

Can I customize the 26×50 workshop / hobby space in 3D before I order?

Does a 26×50 workshop / hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 26×50 workshop / hobby space typically adds $10,400–$15,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

26×50 Commercial Steel Building

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

26×50 Commercial Steel Building | Steel and Stud, From $18,300

26×50 Commercial Steel Building

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$20,850$18,300SAVE $2,550

or $381/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›Commercial Steel Building

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Commercial Steel Building hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Commercial Steel Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of code-compliant commercial steel building space. Ideal for small retail operations, service bays, office-storage combos, contractor shops, detailing bays, and inventory rooms. Code-certified.

You’re viewing:Commercial Steel Building·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$18,300$20,850Save $2,550

or as low as $381/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$18,300

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
From style=”margin-top:18px”8,500
Code Certified
12 Gauge
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-COMMERCIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial steel building layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. 26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of code-compliant commercial steel building space.

Commercial Steel Building layout.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Steel Building at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Commercial Steel Building in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Steel Building.

DAILY USE

Everyday commercial steel building

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial steel building.

STORAGE OVERFLOW commercial steel building + seasonal storage

commercial steel building + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Commercial Steel Building, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$381/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 commercial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $381/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Commercial Steel Building buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Commercial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Commercial Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 commercial steel building cost?

A 26×50 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $18,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $381/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 commercial steel building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 commercial steel building?

How is a Steel and Stud commercial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 26×50 commercial steel building need?

How fast can I get a 26×50 commercial steel building delivered?

Can I finance a 26×50 commercial steel building without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 26×50 commercial steel building?

Can I customize the 26×50 commercial steel building in 3D before I order?

Does the 26×50 commercial steel building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$18,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 Commercial Steel Building

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $16,450

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$18,750$16,450SAVE $2,300

or $343/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›RV Cover / Boat Storage

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller RV Cover / Boat Storage hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 26×50 rv cover / boat storage fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Protect RVs, fifth wheels, travel trailers, boats, and toy haulers with.

You’re viewing:RV Cover / Boat Storage·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$16,450$18,750Save $2,300

or as low as $343/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$16,450

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
From $9,995
Up to 16 Tall
14 Door
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-RV-COVER-BOAT-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. Our 26×50 rv cover / boat storage fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 45ft + 1 daily driver. Protect RVs, fifth wheels, travel trailers, boats, and toy haulers with extra width for side access.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover / Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover / Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover / Boat Storage.

DAILY USE

Everyday rv cover / boat storage

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover / boat storage.

STORAGE OVERFLOW rv cover / boat storage + seasonal storage

rv cover / boat storage + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$343/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 rv cover / boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $343/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover / Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your RV Cover / Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage cost?

A 26×50 rv cover / boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $343/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 rv cover / boat storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover / boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage?

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover / boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage need?

How fast can I get a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage delivered?

Can I finance a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 26×50 rv cover / boat storage?

Can I customize the 26×50 rv cover / boat storage in 3D before I order?

Does a 26×50 rv cover / boat storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 26×50 rv cover / boat storage typically adds $10,400–$15,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover / Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 RV Cover / Boat Storage

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

26×50 Home Gym / Studio

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

26×50 Home Gym / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $16,450

26×50 Home Gym / Studio

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$18,750$16,450SAVE $2,300

or $343/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›Home Gym / Studio

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Home Gym / Studio hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Home Gym / Studio, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 26×50 home gym / studio fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Private 1,1300 sq ft fitness, dance, yoga, martial arts, or creative studio. Add.

You’re viewing:Home Gym / Studio·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$16,450$18,750Save $2,300

or as low as $343/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$16,450

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
From style=”margin-top:18px”3,995
Insulated
Wired Ready
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your home-gym layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Our 26×50 home gym / studio fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Cardio zone · Weight rack · Stretch / Bench

Cardio zone at the front, weight rack in the middle, stretch / bench at the rear. Private 1,1300 sq ft fitness, dance, yoga, martial arts, or creative studio.

💡 Pro tip:Home Gym / Studio at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Home Gym / Studio in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym / Studio spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym / Studio.

DAILY USE

Everyday home gym / studio

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym / studio.

STORAGE OVERFLOW home gym / studio + seasonal storage

home gym / studio + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Home Gym / Studio, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$343/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 home gym / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $343/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Home Gym / Studio buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Home Gym / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Home Gym / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 home gym / studio cost?

A 26×50 home gym / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $16,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $343/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 home gym / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home gym / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 home gym / studio?

How is a Steel and Stud home gym / studio different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 26×50 home gym / studio need?

How fast can I get a 26×50 home gym / studio delivered?

Can I finance a 26×50 home gym / studio without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 26×50 home gym / studio?

Can I customize the 26×50 home gym / studio in 3D before I order?

Can I insulate the 26×50 home gym / studio for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a home gym / studio to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 Home Gym / Studio

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) | Steel and Stud, From $17,100

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$19,500$17,100SAVE $2,400

or $356/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch), built for farm and ranch demands.

26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of rugged metal barn (farm & ranch) space. Use 1,1300 sq ft for hay, feed, livestock shelter, tractors, implements, tack, and ranch supplies. Add lean-tos for extra covered space along one or.

You’re viewing:Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$17,100$19,500Save $2,400

or as low as $356/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$17,100

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
From style=”margin-top:18px”2,500
Lean-To Ready
Heavy Duty
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-METAL-BARN-FARM-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. 26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of rugged metal barn (farm & ranch) space.

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Use 1,1300 sq ft for hay, feed, livestock shelter, tractors, implements, tack, and ranch supplies.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch).

DAILY USE

Everyday metal barn (farm & ranch)

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barn (farm & ranch).

STORAGE OVERFLOW metal barn (farm & ranch) + seasonal storage

metal barn (farm & ranch) + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch), what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$356/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $356/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) cost?

A 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) from Steel and Stud starts at $17,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $356/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal barn (farm & ranch) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch)?

How is a Steel and Stud metal barn (farm & ranch) different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) need?

How fast can I get a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) delivered?

Can I finance a 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch)?

Can I customize the 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) in 3D before I order?

Will the 26×50 metal barn (farm & ranch) stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$17,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $16,450

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$18,750$16,450SAVE $2,300

or $343/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›Man Cave / She Shed

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Man Cave / She Shed hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 26×50 man cave / she shed packs 1300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. A spacious personal retreat for games, music, art, lounge seating, storage, and hobby.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$16,450$18,750Save $2,300

or as low as $343/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$16,450

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
From style=”margin-top:18px”3,995
Insulated
Walk-In Door
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 26×50 man cave / she shed packs 1300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. A spacious personal retreat for games, music, art, lounge seating, storage, and hobby equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / She Shed at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USE

Everyday man cave / she shed

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.

STORAGE OVERFLOW man cave / she shed + seasonal storage

man cave / she shed + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$343/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $343/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 man cave / she shed cost?

A 26×50 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $16,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $343/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 man cave / she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 man cave / she shed?

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 26×50 man cave / she shed need?

How fast can I get a 26×50 man cave / she shed delivered?

Can I finance a 26×50 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 26×50 man cave / she shed?

Can I customize the 26×50 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Can I insulate the 26×50 man cave / she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 Man Cave / She Shed

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $18,700

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$21,300$18,700SAVE $2,600

or $390/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›Warehouse / Equipment Storage

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Warehouse / Equipment Storage hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of heavy-duty warehouse / equipment storage space. Store inventory, machinery, pallets, tools, vehicles, and jobsite equipment in a secure clear-span layout. Upgrade to 12-gauge framing for.

You’re viewing:Warehouse / Equipment Storage·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$18,700$21,300Save $2,600

or as low as $390/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$18,700

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
From style=”margin-top:18px”8,500
Code Certified
12 Gauge
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-WAREHOUSE-EQUIPMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-business warehouse.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Single roll-up door, hand-truck operation. 26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of heavy-duty warehouse / equipment storage space.

Loading area · Inventory racks · Office corner

Loading area at the front, inventory racks in the middle, office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~26 pallet positions. Store inventory, machinery, pallets, tools, vehicles, and jobsite equipment in a secure clear-span layout.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: shelving, desk + computer.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Equipment Storage.

DAILY USE

Everyday warehouse / equipment storage

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / equipment storage.

STORAGE OVERFLOW warehouse / equipment storage + seasonal storage

warehouse / equipment storage + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$390/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $390/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Warehouse / Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage cost?

A 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $18,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $390/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud warehouse / equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage?

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage need?

How fast can I get a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage delivered?

Can I finance a 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage?

Can I customize the 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Will the 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 26×50 warehouse / equipment storage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$18,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 Warehouse / Equipment Storage

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

26×50 Government / Institutional

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

26×50 Government / Institutional | Steel and Stud, From $18,400

26×50 Government / Institutional

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$21,000$18,400SAVE $2,600

or $383/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›Government / Institutional

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Government / Institutional hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Government / Institutional, engineered to code for assembly use.

26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of public-use government / institutional space. Useful for municipal equipment storage, emergency response staging, field offices, school storage, and community support buildings with.

You’re viewing:Government / Institutional·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$18,400$21,000Save $2,600

or as low as $383/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$18,400

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
Engineered
170+ MPH
Fire Code
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-GOVERNMENT-INSTIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your government / institutional layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. 26×50 delivers 1300 sq ft of public-use government / institutional space.

Government / Institutional layout.

💡 Pro tip:Government / Institutional at 26×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Government / Institutional in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Government / Institutional.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Government / Institutional spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Government / Institutional.

DAILY USE

Everyday government / institutional

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a government / institutional.

STORAGE OVERFLOW government / institutional + seasonal storage

government / institutional + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Government / Institutional, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$383/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 government / institutional is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $383/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Government / Institutional shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Government / Institutional buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Government / Institutional

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Government / Institutional · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 government / institutional cost?

A 26×50 government / institutional from Steel and Stud starts at $18,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $383/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 government / institutional price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud government / institutional ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 government / institutional?

How is a Steel and Stud government / institutional different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 26×50 government / institutional need?

How fast can I get a 26×50 government / institutional delivered?

Can I finance a 26×50 government / institutional without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 26×50 government / institutional?

Can I customize the 26×50 government / institutional in 3D before I order?

Will the 26×50 government / institutional pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Government / Institutional quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$18,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 Government / Institutional

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building | Steel and Stud, From $17,100

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$19,500$17,100SAVE $2,400

or $356/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›Equestrian / Tack Building

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Equestrian / Tack Building hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 26×50 equestrian / tack building fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Store tack, hay, feed, grooming equipment, small tractors, and livestock.

You’re viewing:Equestrian / Tack Building·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$17,100$19,500Save $2,400

or as low as $356/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$17,100

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
Up to 20 Tall
Ventilation
Heavy Duty
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-EQUESTRIAN-TACK-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Our 26×50 equestrian / tack building fits 26-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

3 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

3 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 3 horses + tack + feed. Store tack, hay, feed, grooming equipment, small tractors, and livestock supplies.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian / Tack Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian / Tack Building spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian / Tack Building.

DAILY USE

Everyday equestrian / tack building

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian / tack building.

STORAGE OVERFLOW equestrian / tack building + seasonal storage

equestrian / tack building + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$356/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 equestrian / tack building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $356/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian / Tack Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Equestrian / Tack Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 equestrian / tack building cost?

A 26×50 equestrian / tack building from Steel and Stud starts at $17,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $356/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 equestrian / tack building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equestrian / tack building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 equestrian / tack building?

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian / tack building different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 26×50 equestrian / tack building need?

How fast can I get a 26×50 equestrian / tack building delivered?

Can I finance a 26×50 equestrian / tack building without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 26×50 equestrian / tack building?

Can I customize the 26×50 equestrian / tack building in 3D before I order?

Will the 26×50 equestrian / tack building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian / Tack Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$17,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 Equestrian / Tack Building

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space | Steel and Stud, From $18,400

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$21,000$18,400SAVE $2,600

or $383/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›26×50›Houses of Worship / Community Space

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Houses of Worship / Community Space hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 26×50 houses of worship / community space? At 1300 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

You’re viewing:Houses of Worship / Community Space·Size26×50·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$18,400$21,000Save $2,600

or as low as $383/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 26×50

26×50

this size

$18,400

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

1,300 sq ft enclosed
Clear Span
Insulated
Code Certified
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-26X50-HOUSES-WORSHIP-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your chapel layout.

26 feet wide × 50 feet long. Intimate sanctuary, single-aisle layout. Looking for a 26×50 houses of worship / community space? At 1300 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

Altar / pulpit · Pew area · Foyer

Altar / pulpit at the front, pew area in the middle, foyer at the rear. Capacity: seats ~130.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir stand, narthex.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 26×50 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Houses of Worship / Community Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

1,300 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 26×50 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Houses of Worship / Community Space spec sheet.

Width26′

Length50′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space1,300 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Houses of Worship / Community Space.

DAILY USE

Everyday houses of worship / community space

1,300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a houses of worship / community space.

STORAGE OVERFLOW houses of worship / community space + seasonal storage

houses of worship / community space + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space, what makes it different.

1,300sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$383/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 26×50 houses of worship / community space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $383/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 26×50?

1,300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

26′ × 50′ footprint with 1,300 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $10,400–$15,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Houses of Worship / Community Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 26×50 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 26×50 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Houses of Worship / Community Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

27×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$5,850+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 26×50 houses of worship / community space cost?

A 26×50 houses of worship / community space from Steel and Stud starts at $18,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $383/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 26×50 houses of worship / community space price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud houses of worship / community space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 26×50 houses of worship / community space?

How is a Steel and Stud houses of worship / community space different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 26×50 houses of worship / community space need?

How fast can I get a 26×50 houses of worship / community space delivered?

Can I finance a 26×50 houses of worship / community space without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 26×50 houses of worship / community space?

Can I customize the 26×50 houses of worship / community space in 3D before I order?

Will the 26×50 houses of worship / community space pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Ready to build?

Your Houses of Worship / Community Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$18,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

26×50 Houses of Worship / Community Space

1,300 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

26′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 Metal Carport

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Pre-engineered 28×30 steel building delivers 840 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×30 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

28×30 Metal Carport

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500

or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›Metal Carport

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Metal Carport hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Metal Carport, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 28×30 metal carport packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Open 28×30 carport for two vehicles, boats, ATVs, lawn equipment, or a compact RV. Add side panels.

You’re viewing:Metal Carport·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500

or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$10,650

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
From $4,995
3 Roof Styles
Free Install
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-cover layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 28×30 metal carport packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Cover bay · Pillar zone · Approach apron

Cover bay at the front, pillar zone in the middle, approach apron at the rear. Open 28×30 carport for two vehicles, boats, ATVs, lawn equipment, or a compact RV.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Carport at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Metal Carport in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport.

DAILY USE

Everyday metal carport

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.

STORAGE OVERFLOW metal carport + seasonal storage

metal carport + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Metal Carport, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$222/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Metal Carport buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Metal Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Metal Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 metal carport cost?

A 28×30 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 metal carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 metal carport?

Almost always for 840+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 metal carport need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 metal carport delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 metal carport without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 metal carport?

Can I customize the 28×30 metal carport in 3D before I order?

Does a 28×30 metal carport add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×30 metal carport typically adds $6,720–$10,080 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 Metal Carport

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500

or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›Workshop / Hobby Space

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Workshop / Hobby Space hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 28×30 workshop / hobby space? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. 840 sq ft clear-span workshop for woodworking, auto projects, welding, repairs, and.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Space·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500

or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$10,650

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
From $8,495
Clear Span
Insulation Ready
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Looking for a 28×30 workshop / hobby space? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. 840 sq ft clear-span workshop for woodworking, auto projects, welding, repairs, and weekend hobbies.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Space.

DAILY USE

Everyday workshop / hobby space

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby space.

STORAGE OVERFLOW workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage

workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$222/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 workshop / hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 workshop / hobby space cost?

A 28×30 workshop / hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 workshop / hobby space price?

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 workshop / hobby space?

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 workshop / hobby space need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 workshop / hobby space delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 workshop / hobby space without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 workshop / hobby space?

Can I customize the 28×30 workshop / hobby space in 3D before I order?

Does a 28×30 workshop / hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×30 workshop / hobby space typically adds $6,720–$10,080 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 Workshop / Hobby Space

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 Commercial Storage Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×30 Commercial Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $12,500

28×30 Commercial Storage Building

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$14,250$12,500SAVE $1,750

or $260/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›Commercial Storage Building

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Commercial Storage Building hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Commercial Storage Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

28×30 delivers 840 sq ft of code-compliant commercial storage building space. Small business storage, contractor inventory, service tools, packaged goods, or shop overflow. Add certified engineering, 12-gauge framing.

You’re viewing:Commercial Storage Building·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750

or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$12,500

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
From style=”margin-top:18px”0,995
Code Certified
12 Gauge
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-COMMERCIAL-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial storage building layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. 28×30 delivers 840 sq ft of code-compliant commercial storage building space.

Commercial Storage Building layout.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Storage Building at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Commercial Storage Building in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Storage Building spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Storage Building.

DAILY USE

Everyday commercial storage building

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial storage building.

STORAGE OVERFLOW commercial storage building + seasonal storage

commercial storage building + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Commercial Storage Building, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$260/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 commercial storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Commercial Storage Building buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Commercial Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Commercial Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 commercial storage building cost?

A 28×30 commercial storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 commercial storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 commercial storage building?

How is a Steel and Stud commercial storage building different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 commercial storage building need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 commercial storage building delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 commercial storage building without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 commercial storage building?

Can I customize the 28×30 commercial storage building in 3D before I order?

Does the 28×30 commercial storage building meet IBC commercial code?

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 Commercial Storage Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500

or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›RV Cover / Boat Storage

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller RV Cover / Boat Storage hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 28×30 rv cover / boat storage fits 28-foot widths and 30-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Protect a travel trailer, boat, camper, work trailer, or tall vehicle with.

You’re viewing:RV Cover / Boat Storage·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500

or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$10,650

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
From $5,795
Up to 16 Tall
Vertical Roof
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-RV-COVER-BOAT-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. Our 28×30 rv cover / boat storage fits 28-foot widths and 30-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 26ft + 1 daily driver. Protect a travel trailer, boat, camper, work trailer, or tall vehicle with a 25-foot-wide cover.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover / Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover / Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover / Boat Storage.

DAILY USE

Everyday rv cover / boat storage

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover / boat storage.

STORAGE OVERFLOW rv cover / boat storage + seasonal storage

rv cover / boat storage + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$222/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 rv cover / boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover / Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your RV Cover / Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage cost?

A 28×30 rv cover / boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 rv cover / boat storage price?

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage?

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover / boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 rv cover / boat storage?

Can I customize the 28×30 rv cover / boat storage in 3D before I order?

Does a 28×30 rv cover / boat storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×30 rv cover / boat storage typically adds $6,720–$10,080 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover / Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 RV Cover / Boat Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 Home Gym / Studio

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×30 Home Gym / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

28×30 Home Gym / Studio

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500

or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›Home Gym / Studio

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Home Gym / Studio hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Home Gym / Studio, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 28×30 home gym / studio fits 28-foot widths and 30-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Private 840 sq ft fitness, music, art, or hobby studio. Add insulation, windows.

You’re viewing:Home Gym / Studio·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500

or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$10,650

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
From $8,995
Insulated
Wired Ready
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your home-gym layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Our 28×30 home gym / studio fits 28-foot widths and 30-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

Cardio zone · Weight rack · Stretch / Bench

Cardio zone at the front, weight rack in the middle, stretch / bench at the rear. Private 840 sq ft fitness, music, art, or hobby studio.

💡 Pro tip:Home Gym / Studio at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Home Gym / Studio in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym / Studio spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym / Studio.

DAILY USE

Everyday home gym / studio

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym / studio.

STORAGE OVERFLOW home gym / studio + seasonal storage

home gym / studio + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Home Gym / Studio, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$222/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 home gym / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Home Gym / Studio buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Home Gym / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Home Gym / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 home gym / studio cost?

A 28×30 home gym / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 home gym / studio price?

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 home gym / studio?

How is a Steel and Stud home gym / studio different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 home gym / studio need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 home gym / studio delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 home gym / studio without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 home gym / studio?

Can I customize the 28×30 home gym / studio in 3D before I order?

Can I insulate the 28×30 home gym / studio for year-round use?

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 Home Gym / Studio

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600

or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Store tractors, mowers, hay, feed, ranch tools, tack, small implements, or livestock.

You’re viewing:Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600

or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$11,300

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
From $7,295
Lean-To Ready
Heavy Duty
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-METAL-BARN-EQUIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Store tractors, mowers, hay, feed, ranch tools, tack, small implements, or livestock supplies.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter.

DAILY USE

Everyday metal barn / equipment shelter

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barn / equipment shelter.

STORAGE OVERFLOW metal barn / equipment shelter + seasonal storage

metal barn / equipment shelter + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$235/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter cost?

A 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal barn / equipment shelter ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter?

How is a Steel and Stud metal barn / equipment shelter different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter?

Can I customize the 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter in 3D before I order?

Will the 28×30 metal barn / equipment shelter stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 Metal Barn / Equipment Shelter

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500

or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›Man Cave / She Shed

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Man Cave / She Shed hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 28×30 man cave / she shed packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Create a detached retreat for games, crafts, music, tools, or weekend projects. Insulation.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500

or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$10,650

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
From $8,995
Insulated
Walk-In Door
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 28×30 man cave / she shed packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Create a detached retreat for games, crafts, music, tools, or weekend projects.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / She Shed at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USE

Everyday man cave / she shed

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.

STORAGE OVERFLOW man cave / she shed + seasonal storage

man cave / she shed + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$222/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 man cave / she shed cost?

A 28×30 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 man cave / she shed price?

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 man cave / she shed?

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 man cave / she shed need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 man cave / she shed delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 man cave / she shed?

Can I customize the 28×30 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Can I insulate the 28×30 man cave / she shed for year-round use?

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 Man Cave / She Shed

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building | Steel and Stud, From $12,900

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$14,700$12,900SAVE $1,800

or $269/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›Shop / Light Industrial Building

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Shop / Light Industrial Building hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

You’re viewing:Shop / Light Industrial Building·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$12,900$14,700Save $1,800

or as low as $269/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$12,900

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
From style=”margin-top:18px”0,995
Code Certified
12 Gauge
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-SHOP-LIGHT-INDUSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shop / light industrial building layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 28×30 shop / light industrial building packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Shop / Light Industrial Building layout.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 28×30 shop / light industrial building packs 840 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Compact shop for equipment repair, fabrication, parts storage, inventory staging, or light manufacturing. Upgrade to 12-gauge framing for heavier daily use.

💡 Pro tip:Shop / Light Industrial Building at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Shop / Light Industrial Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Shop / Light Industrial Building spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Shop / Light Industrial Building.

DAILY USE

Everyday shop / light industrial building

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a shop / light industrial building.

STORAGE OVERFLOW shop / light industrial building + seasonal storage

shop / light industrial building + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$269/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 shop / light industrial building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $269/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Shop / Light Industrial Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Shop / Light Industrial Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 shop / light industrial building cost?

A 28×30 shop / light industrial building from Steel and Stud starts at $12,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $269/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 shop / light industrial building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud shop / light industrial building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 shop / light industrial building?

How is a Steel and Stud shop / light industrial building different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 shop / light industrial building need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 shop / light industrial building delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 shop / light industrial building without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 shop / light industrial building?

Can I customize the 28×30 shop / light industrial building in 3D before I order?

Will the 28×30 shop / light industrial building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 28×30 shop / light industrial building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Shop / Light Industrial Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 Shop / Light Industrial Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage | Steel and Stud, From $12,600

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$14,350$12,600SAVE $1,750

or $263/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›Government / Institutional Storage

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Government / Institutional Storage hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 28×30 government / institutional storage? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Municipal equipment storage, school maintenance shed, field office, emergency.

You’re viewing:Government / Institutional Storage·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$12,600$14,350Save $1,750

or as low as $263/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$12,600

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
Engineered
170+ MPH
Fire Code
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-GOVERNMENT-INSTIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your government / institutional storage layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 28×30 government / institutional storage? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

Government / Institutional Storage layout.

💡 Pro tip:Government / Institutional Storage at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Government / Institutional Storage in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Government / Institutional Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Government / Institutional Storage spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Government / Institutional Storage.

DAILY USE

Everyday government / institutional storage

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a government / institutional storage.

STORAGE OVERFLOW government / institutional storage + seasonal storage

government / institutional storage + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$263/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 government / institutional storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $263/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Government / Institutional Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Government / Institutional Storage buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Government / Institutional Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Government / Institutional Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 government / institutional storage cost?

A 28×30 government / institutional storage from Steel and Stud starts at $12,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $263/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 government / institutional storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud government / institutional storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 government / institutional storage?

How is a Steel and Stud government / institutional storage different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 government / institutional storage need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 government / institutional storage delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 government / institutional storage without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 government / institutional storage?

Can I customize the 28×30 government / institutional storage in 3D before I order?

Will the 28×30 government / institutional storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Ready to build?

Your Government / Institutional Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 Government / Institutional Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600

or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›Tack Room / Feed Storage

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Tack Room / Feed Storage hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 28×30 tack room / feed storage? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Add ventilation and walk-in access for daily chores.

You’re viewing:Tack Room / Feed Storage·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600

or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$11,300

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
From $7,995
Ventilation
Heavy Duty
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-TACK-ROOM-FEED-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Looking for a 28×30 tack room / feed storage? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

1 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

1 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 1 horses + tack + feed. Add ventilation and walk-in access for daily chores.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tack Room / Feed Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tack Room / Feed Storage spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tack Room / Feed Storage.

DAILY USE

Everyday tack room / feed storage

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tack room / feed storage.

STORAGE OVERFLOW tack room / feed storage + seasonal storage

tack room / feed storage + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$235/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 tack room / feed storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tack Room / Feed Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Tack Room / Feed Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 tack room / feed storage cost?

A 28×30 tack room / feed storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 tack room / feed storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tack room / feed storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 tack room / feed storage?

How is a Steel and Stud tack room / feed storage different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 tack room / feed storage need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 tack room / feed storage delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 tack room / feed storage without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 tack room / feed storage?

Can I customize the 28×30 tack room / feed storage in 3D before I order?

Will the 28×30 tack room / feed storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

Ready to build?

Your Tack Room / Feed Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 Tack Room / Feed Storage

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building | Steel and Stud, From $12,600

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$14,350$12,600SAVE $1,750

or $263/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×30›Community / Multi-Purpose Building

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Community / Multi-Purpose Building hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

You’re viewing:Community / Multi-Purpose Building·Size28×30·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$12,600$14,350Save $1,750

or as low as $263/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×30

28×30

this size

$12,600

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

840 sq ft enclosed
Clear Span
Insulated
Code Certified
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X30-COMMUNITY-MULTI-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your community / multi-purpose building layout.

28 feet wide × 30 feet long. Looking for a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

Community / Multi-Purpose Building layout.

Looking for a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building? At 840 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

💡 Pro tip:Community / Multi-Purpose Building at 28×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×30 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Multi-Purpose Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

840 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×30 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Multi-Purpose Building spec sheet.

Width28′

Length30′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space840 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Multi-Purpose Building.

DAILY USE

Everyday community / multi-purpose building

840 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / multi-purpose building.

STORAGE OVERFLOW community / multi-purpose building + seasonal storage

community / multi-purpose building + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building, what makes it different.

840sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$263/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×30 community / multi-purpose building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $263/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×30?

840 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 30′ footprint with 840 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $6,720–$10,080 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Multi-Purpose Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×30 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×30 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Community / Multi-Purpose Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$3,780+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building cost?

A 28×30 community / multi-purpose building from Steel and Stud starts at $12,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $263/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×30 community / multi-purpose building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community / multi-purpose building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building?

How is a Steel and Stud community / multi-purpose building different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building need?

How fast can I get a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building delivered?

Can I finance a 28×30 community / multi-purpose building without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×30 community / multi-purpose building?

Can I customize the 28×30 community / multi-purpose building in 3D before I order?

Will the 28×30 community / multi-purpose building pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Ready to build?

Your Community / Multi-Purpose Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×30 Community / Multi-Purpose Building

840 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 Two-Car Garage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Pre-engineered 28×32 steel building delivers 896 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

28×32 Two-Car Garage | Steel and Stud, From $11,350

28×32 Two-Car Garage

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600

or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›Two-Car Garage

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Two-Car Garage hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Two-Car Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 28×32 two-car garage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. The most-quoted 28×32 metal garage configuration. Homeowners park two full-size pickups or SUVs.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Garage·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600

or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$11,350

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
Dual 9×8 Roll-Ups
14 GA Frame
Free Install
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-TWO-CAR-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 28×32 two-car garage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop. The most-quoted 28×32 metal garage configuration.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Two-Car Garage in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Garage spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Garage.

DAILY USE

Everyday two-car garage

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car garage.

STORAGE OVERFLOW two-car garage + seasonal storage

two-car garage + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Two-Car Garage, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$236/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 two-car garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Two-Car Garage buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Two-Car Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Two-Car Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 two-car garage cost?

A 28×32 two-car garage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 two-car garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 two-car garage?

Almost always for 896+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car garage different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 two-car garage need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 two-car garage delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 two-car garage without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 two-car garage?

Can I customize the 28×32 two-car garage in 3D before I order?

Does a 28×32 two-car garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×32 two-car garage typically adds $7,168–$10,752 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 Two-Car Garage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 Detached Garage with Loft

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×32 Detached Garage with Loft | Steel and Stud, From $11,350

28×32 Detached Garage with Loft

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600

or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›Detached Garage with Loft

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Detached Garage with Loft hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Detached Garage with Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 28×32 detached garage with loft? At 896 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Add an engineered mezzanine across one gable end for 896 sq ft of overhead storage.

You’re viewing:Detached Garage with Loft·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600

or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$11,350

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
Mezzanine Loft
16′ Leg Height
Pull-Down Stair
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-DETACHED-GARAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. Looking for a 28×32 detached garage with loft? At 896 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop. Add an engineered mezzanine across one gable end for 896 sq ft of overhead storage above a standard two-car footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Engineered Loads. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Detached Garage with Loft in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Garage with Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Garage with Loft spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Garage with Loft.

DAILY USE

Everyday detached garage with loft

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached garage with loft.

STORAGE OVERFLOW detached garage with loft + seasonal storage

detached garage with loft + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Detached Garage with Loft, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$236/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 detached garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Garage with Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Detached Garage with Loft buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Detached Garage with Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Detached Garage with Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 detached garage with loft cost?

A 28×32 detached garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 detached garage with loft price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud detached garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 detached garage with loft?

How is a Steel and Stud detached garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 detached garage with loft need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 detached garage with loft delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 detached garage with loft without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 detached garage with loft?

Can I customize the 28×32 detached garage with loft in 3D before I order?

Does a 28×32 detached garage with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×32 detached garage with loft typically adds $7,168–$10,752 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Garage with Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 Detached Garage with Loft

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 RV Cover with Storage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×32 RV Cover with Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,350

28×32 RV Cover with Storage

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600

or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›RV Cover with Storage

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller RV Cover with Storage hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 RV Cover with Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 28×32 rv cover with storage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. RV owners back a Class A or fifth-wheel under a 14-foot center clearance and use the.

You’re viewing:RV Cover with Storage·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600

or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$11,350

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
14′ Clearance
Vertical Roof
Partial Enclosure
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-RV-COVER-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 28×32 rv cover with storage packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 28ft + 1 daily driver. RV owners back a Class A or fifth-wheel under a 14-foot center clearance and use the partial side enclosure for tools, deep cycle batteries, and patio gear.

💡 Pro tip:Hurricane-Rated. Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 RV Cover with Storage in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Storage spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Storage.

DAILY USE

Everyday rv cover with storage

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with storage.

STORAGE OVERFLOW rv cover with storage + seasonal storage

rv cover with storage + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 RV Cover with Storage, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$236/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 rv cover with storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 RV Cover with Storage buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 RV Cover with Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your RV Cover with Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 rv cover with storage cost?

A 28×32 rv cover with storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 rv cover with storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover with storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 rv cover with storage?

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with storage different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 rv cover with storage need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 rv cover with storage delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 rv cover with storage without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 rv cover with storage?

Can I customize the 28×32 rv cover with storage in 3D before I order?

Can I insulate the 28×32 rv cover with storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 RV Cover with Storage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 Equipment Shelter

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×32 Equipment Shelter | Steel and Stud, From $12,000

28×32 Equipment Shelter

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$13,700$12,000SAVE $1,700

or $250/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›Equipment Shelter

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Equipment Shelter hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Equipment Shelter, built for farm and ranch demands.

You’re viewing:Equipment Shelter·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$12,000$13,700Save $1,700

or as low as $250/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$12,000

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
Gable Drive-Thru
Galvanized Frame
Free Delivery
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-EQUIPMENT-SHELTEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment shelter layout.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. Our 28×32 equipment shelter fits 28-foot widths and 32-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Equipment Shelter layout.

Our 28×32 equipment shelter fits 28-foot widths and 32-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Hobby farmers cover a compact tractor, brush hog, ATV, and round bale or two under one roof. Gable-end-open layout drives equipment straight through without backing, and 14-gauge galvanized steel tubing handles the dust, manure, and salt that destroys wood pole barns.

💡 Pro tip:Free Delivery.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Equipment Shelter in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Shelter.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Shelter spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Shelter.

DAILY USE

Everyday equipment shelter

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment shelter.

STORAGE OVERFLOW equipment shelter + seasonal storage

equipment shelter + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Equipment Shelter, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$250/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 equipment shelter is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $250/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Shelter shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Equipment Shelter buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Equipment Shelter

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Equipment Shelter · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 equipment shelter cost?

A 28×32 equipment shelter from Steel and Stud starts at $12,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $250/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 equipment shelter price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment shelter ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 equipment shelter?

How is a Steel and Stud equipment shelter different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 equipment shelter need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 equipment shelter delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 equipment shelter without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 equipment shelter?

Can I customize the 28×32 equipment shelter in 3D before I order?

Will the 28×32 equipment shelter stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Shelter quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 Equipment Shelter

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 Garage + Workshop Combo

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×32 Garage + Workshop Combo | Steel and Stud, From $11,350

28×32 Garage + Workshop Combo

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600

or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›Garage + Workshop Combo

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Garage + Workshop Combo hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Garage + Workshop Combo, built for daily backyard use.

Our 28×32 garage + workshop combo fits 28-foot widths and 32-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Split the 32-foot length into a 28×32 two-car garage up front and a 28×32.

You’re viewing:Garage + Workshop Combo·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600

or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$11,350

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
Interior Partition
Two Walk-Ins
R-13 Insulation
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-GARAGE-WORKSHOP-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two-bay garage.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. Two 9-ft doors, walk-in side entry. Our 28×32 garage + workshop combo fits 28-foot widths and 32-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 at the front, vehicle bay 2 in the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + small workshop. Split the 32-foot length into a 28×32 two-car garage up front and a 28×32 workshop in the rear, divided by a steel-stud interior partition.

💡 Pro tip:24-Hour Quote. Size affords: lift rough-in, air compressor, shop sink.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Garage + Workshop Combo in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage + Workshop Combo.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage + Workshop Combo spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage + Workshop Combo.

DAILY USE

Everyday garage + workshop combo

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage + workshop combo.

STORAGE OVERFLOW garage + workshop combo + seasonal storage

garage + workshop combo + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Garage + Workshop Combo, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$236/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 garage + workshop combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage + Workshop Combo shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Garage + Workshop Combo buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Garage + Workshop Combo

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Garage + Workshop Combo · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 garage + workshop combo cost?

A 28×32 garage + workshop combo from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 garage + workshop combo price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage + workshop combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 garage + workshop combo?

How is a Steel and Stud garage + workshop combo different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 garage + workshop combo need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 garage + workshop combo delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 garage + workshop combo without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 garage + workshop combo?

Can I customize the 28×32 garage + workshop combo in 3D before I order?

Does a 28×32 garage + workshop combo add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×32 garage + workshop combo typically adds $7,168–$10,752 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage + Workshop Combo quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 Garage + Workshop Combo

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 Horse Barn

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×32 Horse Barn | Steel and Stud, From $12,000

28×32 Horse Barn

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$13,700$12,000SAVE $1,700

or $250/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›Horse Barn

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Horse Barn hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 28×32 horse barn packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers configure four 28×32 stalls along one 32-foot wall with an aisle and tack room opposite. Sliding barn.

You’re viewing:Horse Barn·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$12,000$13,700Save $1,700

or as low as $250/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$12,000

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
Sliding Barn Doors
4:12 Pitch
Stamped Drawings
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-HORSE-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 28×32 horse barn packs 896 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

1 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

1 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 1 horses + tack + feed. Hobby farmers configure four 28×32 stalls along one 32-foot wall with an aisle and tack room opposite.

💡 Pro tip:Stamped Drawings. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Horse Barn in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn.

DAILY USE

Everyday horse barn

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn.

STORAGE OVERFLOW horse barn + seasonal storage

horse barn + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Horse Barn, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$250/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $250/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Horse Barn buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Horse Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Horse Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 horse barn cost?

A 28×32 horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $12,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $250/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 horse barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 horse barn?

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 horse barn need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 horse barn delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 horse barn without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 horse barn?

Can I customize the 28×32 horse barn in 3D before I order?

Will the 28×32 horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 Horse Barn

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 Contractor Shop

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×32 Contractor Shop | Steel and Stud, From $13,200

28×32 Contractor Shop

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$15,050$13,200SAVE $1,850

or $275/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›Contractor Shop

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Contractor Shop hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Contractor Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

28×32 delivers 896 sq ft of code-compliant contractor shop space. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors run a small fleet shop out of this footprint. Two 28×32 roll-ups for service vans, a 28×32 walk-in to the.

You’re viewing:Contractor Shop·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$13,200$15,050Save $1,850

or as low as $275/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$13,200

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
Dual 10×10 Roll-Ups
Framed Office
12 GA Frame
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-CONTRACTOR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. 28×32 delivers 896 sq ft of code-compliant contractor shop space.

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors run a small fleet shop out of this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:IBC Certified.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Contractor Shop in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Shop spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Shop.

DAILY USE

Everyday contractor shop

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor shop.

STORAGE OVERFLOW contractor shop + seasonal storage

contractor shop + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Contractor Shop, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$275/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 contractor shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $275/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Contractor Shop buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Contractor Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Contractor Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 contractor shop cost?

A 28×32 contractor shop from Steel and Stud starts at $13,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $275/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 contractor shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 contractor shop?

How is a Steel and Stud contractor shop different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 contractor shop need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 contractor shop delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 contractor shop without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 contractor shop?

Can I customize the 28×32 contractor shop in 3D before I order?

Does the 28×32 contractor shop meet IBC commercial code?

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$13,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 Contractor Shop

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 Man Cave / She Shed

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×32 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $11,350

28×32 Man Cave / She Shed

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600

or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›Man Cave / She Shed

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Man Cave / She Shed hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Man Cave / She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 28×32 man cave / she shed? At 896 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Homeowners finish 896 sq ft into a hangout with a lounge area, half bath, and bar or craft.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600

or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$11,350

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
Wainscoting
Storefront Windows
R-19 Insulation
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 28×32 man cave / she shed? At 896 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitch. in the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Homeowners finish 896 sq ft into a hangout with a lounge area, half bath, and bar or craft station.

💡 Pro tip:Custom Color Match.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USE

Everyday man cave / she shed

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.

STORAGE OVERFLOW man cave / she shed + seasonal storage

man cave / she shed + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Man Cave / She Shed, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$236/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 man cave / she shed cost?

A 28×32 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 man cave / she shed price?

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 man cave / she shed?

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 man cave / she shed need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 man cave / she shed delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 man cave / she shed?

Can I customize the 28×32 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Does a 28×32 man cave / she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 28×32 man cave / she shed typically adds $7,168–$10,752 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 Man Cave / She Shed

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 Boat & Toy Storage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×32 Boat & Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,350

28×32 Boat & Toy Storage

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$12,950$11,350SAVE $1,600

or $236/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›Boat & Toy Storage

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Boat & Toy Storage hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Boat & Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

28×32 delivers 896 sq ft of hobby-ready boat & toy storage space. Lake-house owners park a 28-foot bowrider on a trailer, two jet skis, and a side-by-side under one roof. The 32-foot length swallows the trailer tongue.

You’re viewing:Boat & Toy Storage·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$11,350$12,950Save $1,600

or as low as $236/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$11,350

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
12×12 Roll-Up
Gable Access
Galvalume Roof
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-BOAT-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. 28×32 delivers 896 sq ft of hobby-ready boat & toy storage space.

Boat + trailer · Daily driver · Outboard / rinse

Boat + trailer at the front, daily driver in the middle, outboard / rinse at the rear. Lake-house owners park a 28-foot bowrider on a trailer, two jet skis, and a side-by-side under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Galvalume Roof.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Boat & Toy Storage in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Toy Storage.

DAILY USE

Everyday boat & toy storage

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & toy storage.

STORAGE OVERFLOW boat & toy storage + seasonal storage

boat & toy storage + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Boat & Toy Storage, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$236/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 boat & toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $236/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Boat & Toy Storage buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Boat & Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Boat & Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 boat & toy storage cost?

A 28×32 boat & toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $236/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 boat & toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat & toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 boat & toy storage?

How is a Steel and Stud boat & toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 boat & toy storage need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 boat & toy storage delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 boat & toy storage without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 boat & toy storage?

Can I customize the 28×32 boat & toy storage in 3D before I order?

Can I insulate the 28×32 boat & toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 Boat & Toy Storage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 Hay & Feed Storage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×32 Hay & Feed Storage | Steel and Stud, From $12,000

28×32 Hay & Feed Storage

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$13,700$12,000SAVE $1,700

or $250/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›Hay & Feed Storage

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Hay & Feed Storage hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Hay & Feed Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

28×32 delivers 896 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage space. Rural property owners stack roughly 220-260 small square bales or a dozen 28×32 round bales under a fully enclosed 28×32 steel building. Sliding 12-foot barn.

You’re viewing:Hay & Feed Storage·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$12,000$13,700Save $1,700

or as low as $250/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$12,000

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
12′ Sliding Door
Vertical Roof
Galvanized Frame
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. 28×32 delivers 896 sq ft of rugged hay & feed storage space.

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Rural property owners stack roughly 220-260 small square bales or a dozen 28×32 round bales under a fully enclosed 28×32 steel building.

💡 Pro tip:20-Yr Warranty.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Hay & Feed Storage in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Feed Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Feed Storage spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Feed Storage.

DAILY USE

Everyday hay & feed storage

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed storage.

STORAGE OVERFLOW hay & feed storage + seasonal storage

hay & feed storage + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Hay & Feed Storage, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$250/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 hay & feed storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $250/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Feed Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Hay & Feed Storage buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Hay & Feed Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Hay & Feed Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 hay & feed storage cost?

A 28×32 hay & feed storage from Steel and Stud starts at $12,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $250/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 hay & feed storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 hay & feed storage?

How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed storage different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 hay & feed storage need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 hay & feed storage delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 hay & feed storage without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 hay & feed storage?

Can I customize the 28×32 hay & feed storage in 3D before I order?

Will the 28×32 hay & feed storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Feed Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 Hay & Feed Storage

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

28×32 Carport + Office

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

28×32 Carport + Office | Steel and Stud, From $13,200

28×32 Carport + Office

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$15,050$13,200SAVE $1,850

or $275/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›28×32›Carport + Office

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Carport + Office hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

28×32 Carport + Office, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 28×32 carport + office? At 896 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Small businesses cover three customer-facing parking spots under a 28×32 open carport up front and.

You’re viewing:Carport + Office·Size28×32·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$13,200$15,050Save $1,850

or as low as $275/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 28×32

28×32

this size

$13,200

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

896 sq ft enclosed
Half-Open Layout
HVAC Framed
Storefront Windows
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-28X32-CARPORT-OFFICEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-cover layout.

28 feet wide × 32 feet long. Looking for a 28×32 carport + office? At 896 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Cover bay · Pillar zone · Approach apron

Cover bay at the front, pillar zone in the middle, approach apron at the rear. Small businesses cover three customer-facing parking spots under a 28×32 open carport up front and enclose a 28×32 office in the rear with HVAC framing, a walk-in door, and two windows.

💡 Pro tip:Storefront Windows.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 28×32 Carport + Office in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 28×32 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport + Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

896 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 28×32 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport + Office spec sheet.

Width28′

Length32′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space896 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport + Office.

DAILY USE

Everyday carport + office

896 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport + office.

STORAGE OVERFLOW carport + office + seasonal storage

carport + office + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

28×32 Carport + Office, what makes it different.

896sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$275/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 28×32 carport + office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $275/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 28×32?

896 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

28′ × 32′ footprint with 896 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $7,168–$10,752 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport + Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 28×32 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 28×32 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 28×32 Carport + Office buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 28×32 Carport + Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Carport + Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

29×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$4,032+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 28×32 carport + office cost?

A 28×32 carport + office from Steel and Stud starts at $13,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $275/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 28×32 carport + office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport + office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 28×32 carport + office?

How is a Steel and Stud carport + office different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 28×32 carport + office need?

How fast can I get a 28×32 carport + office delivered?

Can I finance a 28×32 carport + office without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 28×32 carport + office?

Can I customize the 28×32 carport + office in 3D before I order?

Does the 28×32 carport + office meet IBC commercial code?

Ready to build?

Your Carport + Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$13,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

28×32 Carport + Office

896 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

28′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

30×100 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Pre-engineered 30×100 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

30×100 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor | Steel and Stud, From $46,700

30×100 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$53,250$46,700SAVE $6,550

or $973/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›30×100›RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

30×100 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor, built for hobby and recreational use.

30×100 delivers 3000 sq ft of hobby-ready rv & travel trailer storage corridor space. RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheels park three full-length rigs end-to-end under one continuous roof. The 100-foot run.

You’re viewing:RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor·Size30×100·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$46,700$53,250Save $6,550

or as low as $973/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×100

30×100

this size

$46,700

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

3,000 sq ft enclosed
12 GA Frame
Vertical Roof
Drive-Through Doors
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-30X100-RV-TRAVEL-TRAILEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

30 feet wide × 100 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. 30×100 delivers 3000 sq ft of hobby-ready rv & travel trailer storage corridor space.

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheels park three full-length rigs end-to-end under one continuous roof.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Doors. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×100 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 30×100 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

3,000 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 30×100 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor spec sheet.

Width30′

Length100′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space3,000 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor.

DAILY USE

Everyday rv & travel trailer storage corridor

3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & travel trailer storage corridor.

STORAGE OVERFLOW rv & travel trailer storage corridor + seasonal storage

rv & travel trailer storage corridor + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×100 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$973/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $973/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 30×100?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

30′ × 100′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×100 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 30×100 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×100 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 30×100 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

31×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$13,500+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor cost?

A 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor from Steel and Stud starts at $46,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $973/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & travel trailer storage corridor ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & travel trailer storage corridor different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor need?

How fast can I get a 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor delivered?

Can I finance a 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor?

Can I customize the 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor in 3D before I order?

Can I insulate the 30×100 rv & travel trailer storage corridor for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv & travel trailer storage corridor to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$46,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

30×100 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$46,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

30×100 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

30×100 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed | Steel and Stud, From $47,350

30×100 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$54,000$47,350SAVE $6,650

or $986/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›30×100›Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

30×100 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed? At 3000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Hobby farmers stack round bales five-wide along the 100-foot wall and pull a tractor.

You’re viewing:Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed·Size30×100·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$47,350$54,000Save $6,650

or as low as $986/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×100

30×100

this size

$47,350

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

3,000 sq ft enclosed
14 GA Frame
Open Sides
Free Install
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-30X100-HAY-EQUIPMENT-RUBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

30 feet wide × 100 feet long. Looking for a 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed? At 3000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Hobby farmers stack round bales five-wide along the 100-foot wall and pull a tractor through the open gable.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×100 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 30×100 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

3,000 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 30×100 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed spec sheet.

Width30′

Length100′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space3,000 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed.

DAILY USE

Everyday hay & equipment run-in shed

3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & equipment run-in shed.

STORAGE OVERFLOW hay & equipment run-in shed + seasonal storage

hay & equipment run-in shed + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×100 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$986/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $986/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 30×100?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

30′ × 100′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×100 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 30×100 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×100 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 30×100 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

31×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$13,500+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed cost?

A 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed from Steel and Stud starts at $47,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $986/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & equipment run-in shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed?

How is a Steel and Stud hay & equipment run-in shed different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed need?

How fast can I get a 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed delivered?

Can I finance a 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed?

Can I customize the 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed in 3D before I order?

Will the 30×100 hay & equipment run-in shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$47,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

30×100 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$47,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

30×100 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

30×100 Contractor Supply & Van Bay | Steel and Stud, From $48,550

30×100 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$55,350$48,550SAVE $6,800

or $1011/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›30×100›Contractor Supply & Van Bay

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Contractor Supply & Van Bay hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

30×100 Contractor Supply & Van Bay, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 30×100 contractor supply & van bay packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Plumbers, electricians, and framers pull a service van straight into the.

You’re viewing:Contractor Supply & Van Bay·Size30×100·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$48,550$55,350Save $6,800

or as low as $1011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×100

30×100

this size

$48,550

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully Enclosed
Van Pull-In
26 GA Panels
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-30X100-CONTRACTOR-SUPPLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

30 feet wide × 100 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 30×100 contractor supply & van bay packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. Plumbers, electricians, and framers pull a service van straight into the end bay of the 30×100 and use the remaining 80 feet as a walk-in supply room for fittings, conduit, and fixtures.

💡 Pro tip:Van Pull-In.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×100 Contractor Supply & Van Bay in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 30×100 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Supply & Van Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

3,000 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 30×100 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Supply & Van Bay spec sheet.

Width30′

Length100′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space3,000 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Supply & Van Bay.

DAILY USE

Everyday contractor supply & van bay

3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor supply & van bay.

STORAGE OVERFLOW contractor supply & van bay + seasonal storage

contractor supply & van bay + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×100 Contractor Supply & Van Bay, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$1011/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×100 contractor supply & van bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $1011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 30×100?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

30′ × 100′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Supply & Van Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×100 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 30×100 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×100 Contractor Supply & Van Bay buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 30×100 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Contractor Supply & Van Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

31×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$13,500+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 30×100 contractor supply & van bay cost?

A 30×100 contractor supply & van bay from Steel and Stud starts at $48,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×100 contractor supply & van bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor supply & van bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×100 contractor supply & van bay?

How is a Steel and Stud contractor supply & van bay different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 30×100 contractor supply & van bay need?

How fast can I get a 30×100 contractor supply & van bay delivered?

Can I finance a 30×100 contractor supply & van bay without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 30×100 contractor supply & van bay?

Can I customize the 30×100 contractor supply & van bay in 3D before I order?

Does the 30×100 contractor supply & van bay meet IBC commercial code?

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Supply & Van Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

30×100 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

30×100 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

30×100 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench | Steel and Stud, From $46,700

30×100 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$53,250$46,700SAVE $6,550

or $973/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›30×100›Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Long Workshop & Hobby Bench hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

30×100 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with a side-yard run set up a 100-foot workbench down one wall and.

You’re viewing:Long Workshop & Hobby Bench·Size30×100·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$46,700$53,250Save $6,550

or as low as $973/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×100

30×100

this size

$46,700

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

3,000 sq ft enclosed
A-Frame Roof
R-19 Insulation
Walk-In Door
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-30X100-LONG-WORKSHOP-HOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

30 feet wide × 100 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Homeowners with a side-yard run set up a 100-foot workbench down one wall and rolling tool chests down the other.

💡 Pro tip:R-19 Insulation. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×100 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 30×100 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

3,000 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 30×100 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench spec sheet.

Width30′

Length100′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space3,000 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Long Workshop & Hobby Bench.

DAILY USE

Everyday long workshop & hobby bench

3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a long workshop & hobby bench.

STORAGE OVERFLOW long workshop & hobby bench + seasonal storage

long workshop & hobby bench + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×100 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$973/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $973/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 30×100?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

30′ × 100′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Long Workshop & Hobby Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×100 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 30×100 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×100 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 30×100 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

31×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$13,500+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench cost?

A 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench from Steel and Stud starts at $46,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $973/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud long workshop & hobby bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench?

How is a Steel and Stud long workshop & hobby bench different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench need?

How fast can I get a 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench delivered?

Can I finance a 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench?

Can I customize the 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench in 3D before I order?

Does a 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 30×100 long workshop & hobby bench typically adds $24,000–$36,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$46,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

30×100 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$46,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

30×100 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

30×100 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud, From $46,700

30×100 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$53,250$46,700SAVE $6,550

or $973/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›30×100›Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

30×100 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Marina-adjacent property owners stage 2-3 bass boats, jet ski trailers.

You’re viewing:Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage·Size30×100·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$46,700$53,250Save $6,550

or as low as $973/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×100

30×100

this size

$46,700

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

3,000 sq ft enclosed
Vertical Roof
Hurricane Cert
Roll-Up Door
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-30X100-SINGLE-LANE-BOATBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

30 feet wide × 100 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage packs 3000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Boat + trailer · Daily driver · Outboard / rinse

Boat + trailer at the front, daily driver in the middle, outboard / rinse at the rear. Marina-adjacent property owners stage 2-3 bass boats, jet ski trailers, and a center-console end-to-end.

💡 Pro tip:Hurricane Cert.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×100 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 30×100 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

3,000 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 30×100 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width30′

Length100′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space3,000 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USE

Everyday single-lane boat & trailer storage

3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-lane boat & trailer storage.

STORAGE OVERFLOW single-lane boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage

single-lane boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×100 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$973/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $973/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 30×100?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

30′ × 100′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×100 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 30×100 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×100 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 30×100 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

31×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$13,500+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage cost?

A 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $46,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $973/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-lane boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage?

How is a Steel and Stud single-lane boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage need?

How fast can I get a 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage delivered?

Can I finance a 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage?

Can I customize the 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Can I insulate the 30×100 single-lane boat & trailer storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a single-lane boat & trailer storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$46,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

30×100 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$46,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

30×100 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

30×100 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack | Steel and Stud, From $48,950

30×100 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$55,800$48,950SAVE $6,850

or $1020/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›30×100›Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

30×100 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

You’re viewing:Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack·Size30×100·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$48,950$55,800Save $6,850

or as low as $1020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×100

30×100

this size

$48,950

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

3,000 sq ft enclosed
Open Gables
Forklift Clearance
14 GA Frame
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-30X100-PIPE-REBAR-LONG-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your pipe, rebar & long-stock rack layout.

30 feet wide × 100 feet long. Our 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack fits 30-foot widths and 100-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack layout.

Our 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack fits 30-foot widths and 100-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Steel fabricators, irrigation contractors, and pool builders rack 20-foot and 40-foot lengths inside cantilever stands along the 100-foot wall. Forklift access through both gables turns the building into a covered drive-through pull yard for long material.

💡 Pro tip:Forklift Clearance.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×100 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 30×100 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

3,000 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 30×100 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack spec sheet.

Width30′

Length100′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space3,000 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack.

DAILY USE

Everyday pipe, rebar & long-stock rack

3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pipe, rebar & long-stock rack.

STORAGE OVERFLOW pipe, rebar & long-stock rack + seasonal storage

pipe, rebar & long-stock rack + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×100 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$1020/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $1020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 30×100?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

30′ × 100′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×100 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 30×100 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×100 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 30×100 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

31×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$13,500+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack cost?

A 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack from Steel and Stud starts at $48,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pipe, rebar & long-stock rack ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack?

How is a Steel and Stud pipe, rebar & long-stock rack different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack need?

How fast can I get a 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack delivered?

Can I finance a 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack?

Can I customize the 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack in 3D before I order?

Will the 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 30×100 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$48,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

30×100 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$48,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

30×100 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

30×100 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow | Steel and Stud, From $47,350

30×100 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

In stock · ships 3–5 wk

Starting from$54,000$47,350SAVE $6,650

or $986/mo · $0 down · no credit check

🛒Add to Cart ⚡Buy Now 🎨 Customize→Free Sensei3D builder 📞 Request Free Quote→Same-day written price

Home›Metal Buildings›30×100›Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

★ #1 Best Seller Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow hero view

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

30×100 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow, built for farm and ranch demands.

30×100 delivers 3000 sq ft of rugged single-row horse stall shedrow space. Hobby farmers convert the 30×100 into eight 12-foot shedrow stalls with a 4-foot tack area. Dutch doors face outward along the long sidewall for.

You’re viewing:Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow·Size30×100·Slate Gray

Starting from your selected configuration$47,350$54,000Save $6,650

or as low as $986/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Speak with a Specialist · 1-877-275-7048

📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×100

30×100

this size

$47,350

📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′

7′

8′

★9′

10′ +$340

12′ +$640

14′ +$1180

🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray

★Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price▼

🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally

🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors

🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation

🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt

🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings

🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness

📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

⚓

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

⚡

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician

Customizations selected:

Customization subtotal:+$485

🛒Add to CartSave your build, decide later⚡Buy NowExpress checkout · pay after install

3,000 sq ft enclosed
Dutch Doors
Insulated Roof
Wood Trim
180 mph wind certified
65 psf snow load
20-year rust warranty
Free delivery + install

🚚

FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.

SKU:SS-30X100-SINGLE-ROW-HORSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA

🛡️

A+

BBB Accredited

★

4.8/5

customer rating

⏱

Since 2004

In Business

🏠

15,000+

Buildings

🇺🇸

States Served

We’ve provided builds for

SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-stall stable.

30 feet wide × 100 feet long. Full-height clearance supports hay loft (~280 bales). 30×100 delivers 3000 sq ft of rugged single-row horse stall shedrow space.

7 stalls + tack · 12-ft center aisle · Hay loft + Wash bay

7 stalls + tack at the front, 12-ft center aisle in the middle, hay loft + wash bay at the rear. Capacity: 7 horses, full stable ops. Hobby farmers convert the 30×100 into eight 12-foot shedrow stalls with a 4-foot tack area.

💡 Pro tip:Dutch Doors. Size affords: hay loft, wash bay with hot water, feed room.

🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×100 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow in 3D.

Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price

🚀 Customize My 30×100 in Sensei3D →

✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers

LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE

, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️

3,000 sq ft enclosed

Fully-enclosed 30×100 vertical-roof structure.

🚪

Roll-up + walk-in doors

Standard configuration door package.

🔩

14-gauge steel frame

American-rolled galvanized tubing.

🎨

1 standard color

Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow spec sheet.

Width30′

Length100′ + 6" overhang

Side height9′ standard

Floor space3,000 sq ft

Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up

Walk-inOptional (+$345)

WindowsOptional

Windup to 180 mph

Snowup to 65 psf

RoofVertical 3:12

Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)

Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)

AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground

Lead time3 – 5 weeks

USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow.

DAILY USE

Everyday single-row horse stall shedrow

3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-row horse stall shedrow.

STORAGE OVERFLOW single-row horse stall shedrow + seasonal storage

single-row horse stall shedrow + seasonal storage

Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.

FLEX ROOM

Expansion-ready

Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×100 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft

Floor Space

180mph

Wind Rated

65psf

Snow Load

20yr

Rust Warranty

40yr

Paint Warranty

$986/mo

From RTO

🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free

🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer

🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available

🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation

💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

RTO: $986/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

⚡

Why 30×100?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

30′ × 100′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×100 metal building?

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

What’s the typical lead time for a 30×100 building?

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×100 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow buyers say.

⭐

No reviews yet for the 30×100 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review

HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

📞

Call us

Speak with a builder right now. Average wait time under 30 seconds.

Quick questions? Text us directly. Same team that picks up the phone.

Start chat →

Currently online · 3 builders

✉️

Email us

Send detailed specs, drawings, or HOA requirements for review.

sales@steelandstud.com

Reply within 2 business hours

📄

Request written quote

Get an all-in price with your zip code and configuration. No salesperson follow-up unless you ask.

Build my quote →

Same-day delivery

Complete your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️

Concrete Pad Pour

31×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.

$13,500+ Add

Most Added

🌡

R-19 Insulation Package

Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.

$1,795+ Add

💧

Gutter & Downspout Kit

Seamless aluminum, color-matched.

$485+ Add

⚡

200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire

How much does a 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow cost?

A 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow from Steel and Stud starts at $47,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $986/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-row horse stall shedrow ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow?

How is a Steel and Stud single-row horse stall shedrow different from a wood-frame build?

What foundation does a 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow need?

How fast can I get a 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow delivered?

Can I finance a 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow without a credit check?

What warranty comes with the 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow?

Can I customize the 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow in 3D before I order?

Will the 30×100 single-row horse stall shedrow stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

Ready to build?

Your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ Build & Get My Free Quote →📞 Call 1-877-275-7048

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$47,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

30×100 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available

Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$47,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Metal Buildings in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Open 3D Carport Designer Call an Expert Now

Instant Estimate

Metal Buildings Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

Building Type

Width (ft)

Length (ft)

Height (ft)

Install State

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10

Floor Area 960 sq ft

Location FactorStandard

Inventory MatchNo exact match

Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Pre-Engineered Steel

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Over Stick-Built

Faster timelines, lower total cost and a longer structural lifespan. Here is why thousands of property owners build with Steel and Stud instead of wood, block or masonry.

📈

40 to 60% Lower Total Build Cost

Factory fabrication cuts on-site labor, eliminates material waste and compresses your project timeline from months to weeks. Most owners save $15 to $30/sqft versus comparable wood-frame or concrete block construction.

📑

PE-Stamped Drawings Included

Structural engineering and stamped plans come standard with every cold-formed steel order. Designed for your local wind speed, snow load and seismic zone. Submit directly to your building department for permit approval.

↔

Column-Free Interiors to 200+ Feet

Rigid frame engineering eliminates support columns inside the building envelope. Use every square foot of floor space for equipment, inventory, vehicles, courts or congregation seating without obstruction.

🔨

Zero Rot, Warp or Termite Risk

Galvanized steel framing and coated panels resist corrosion, mold and insect damage. The structure holds its form for decades with minimal upkeep. No repainting, no replacing warped studs, no pest treatments.

🌏

Expand, Extend or Relocate

Need more space next year? Add bays to extend length, attach lean-tos for side coverage, or install mezzanine framing for a second level. If your site changes, the building can be disassembled and re-erected on a new foundation.

🏧

Design and Price Online in 3D

The online building configurator lets you set exact dimensions, roof profile, panel type, insulation, doors, windows, colors and accessories. See instant pricing, then download your configuration summary.

Span Engineering

Clear Span vs Single Span vs Multi-Span

The span type you select affects interior layout flexibility, column placement, cost per square foot and maximum achievable width. Steel and Stud engineers each building to the optimal span configuration for your specific application.

Clear Span

No columns, W up to 80 ft

Zero interior columns

Maximum floor plan flexibility

Ideal for sports, worship, hangars

Higher cost per sqft at wide spans

Multi-Span

Interior columns, W 80 to 200+ ft

Widths over 100 feet achievable

Lower per-foot cost

Supports crane rails and mezzanines

Columns affect floor layout

Single Span

Small builds, W up to 40 ft

Most affordable option

Fastest fabrication lead time

Great for small shops and storage

Limited to 40 ft max width

Customer Reviews

What Property Owners Say About Steel and Stud

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Buildings.

★★★★★

4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews

★★★★★

"I needed a large, tall carport to protect my camping trailer in the Texas Panhandle. Bill was patient and very thorough. Three years later, after 80 mph winds collapsed it, Bill stayed in touch the whole way through the rebuild — even after warranty. No one is more customer-friendly."

Verified Customer

RV Owner, Texas

Heavy-Duty Carport

★★★★★

"I ordered two carports for the Healthy Schools Healthy Communities grant in Cabool, MO. Bill went above and beyond — thorough on every detail, called me right back, walked me through the whole order. He even followed up on instructions for the slab pour."

Grant Coordinator

Cabool, MO

Metal Carports

★★★★☆

"Can't ask for any better service. Early install, on time per schedule, efficient and very speedy. Installers didn't stop until completed. No hype sale — we received exactly what we ordered."

Berny Puderer

Verified Customer

Metal Carport

Common Questions

Metal Buildings FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

What sizes are available?

Widths from 20 to 100+ feet, lengths from 20 to 200+ feet, eave heights from 10 to 24 feet. Buildings wider than 60 feet typically use multi-span framing with interior columns.

What does a steel building cost per square foot?

Shell pricing ranges from $8 to $22 per square foot depending on span, height, load ratings, insulation and accessories. Larger footprints cost less per foot due to fixed engineering spread over more area. Steel and Stud provides itemized quotes so you can compare line by line.

Clear span vs multi-span: which do I need?

Clear span means zero interior columns, ideal when you need open floor space (warehouses, arenas, hangars). Multi-span uses interior columns to achieve wider total footprints (80 to 200+ feet) at lower cost. Choose based on how you plan to use the interior.

Are PE-stamped engineered plans included?

Yes. Every cold-formed steel building ships with professional structural engineering and stamped drawings ready for your local building department. No separate engineering fee.

What door and accessory options exist?

Roll-up overhead doors to 24x16, walk-in doors, windows, skylights, gutters, insulation, wainscot, cupolas, lean-tos, mezzanine framing, crane rails and bi-fold hangar doors. Everything is configurable in the 3D designer.

What is the typical fabrication and delivery timeline?

Six to twelve weeks from approved engineering. Components ship on flatbed trucks to your site, ready for erection. Delivery is included in pricing for all 48 states.

Can I self-erect or do I need a contractor?

Buildings under 40x60 can be owner-erected with the right equipment and experience. Larger structures need a professional crew with crane access. We can connect you with experienced erectors in your region.

Is financing available for steel buildings?

Yes. Commercial financing, lease-to-own, equipment financing and monthly payment plans are all available. View all options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

WHAT ARE YOU LOOKING FOR?

WIDTH

LENGTH

HEIGHT

FIRST NAME

LAST NAME

EMAIL ADDRESS

CONTACT NO.

SURFACE

ZIP CODE

ANY ADDITIONAL DETAILS?

By submitting this form, you agree to be contacted regarding your request. Your information will not be shared with third parties.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.

No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.

Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.

Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.

1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Steel Building Sizes, Configurations and Cost Breakdown

Pre-engineered steel structures use cold-formed framing fabricated off-site to your exact specifications. The kit ships to your property, ready for ground-up assembly. This eliminates the weather delays, material waste and skilled-labor bottleneck of conventional construction, cutting total project cost by 40 to 60 percent on average. Steel and Stud has delivered this approach to thousands of commercial and agricultural property owners since 2004.

Available widths run from 20 to 100+ feet. Lengths extend from 20 to 200+ feet in bay increments. Eave heights span 10 to 24+ feet. Rigid frame engineering, a Steel and Stud core competency, delivers column-free interiors to 80 feet wide. Multi-span configurations push total width past 200 feet for campus-scale facilities.

What Drives Pricing in 2026

Total square footage, eave height, span type, local load requirements (wind, snow, seismic), insulation spec, door count and delivery distance all factor into your final quote. Rough benchmarks: $8 to $14 per square foot for agricultural shells, $12 to $18 for commercial buildings, $16 to $22+ for heavy industrial with crane rails or mezzanines. Larger footprints cost less per foot because fixed engineering is spread across more area.

How the 3D Building Configurator Works

The online design tool walks you through dimensions, roof profile (gable, gambrel, single slope), panel orientation, insulation layers, door and window placement, color selection and structural add-ons. It generates a live price estimate and downloadable configuration. A building specialist then finalizes the engineering package and prepares stamped drawings for your permit submission.

Industry Applications

Commercial: retail storefronts, auto shops, contractor yards, self-storage facilities. Industrial: manufacturing plants, distribution hubs, fleet maintenance bays. Agricultural: equipment barns, hay storage, livestock shelter, riding arenas. Institutional: churches, gyms, government facilities, aviation hangars, sports complexes. Each application benefits from open span interiors, fast erection and low lifetime maintenance.

Related Categories

For smaller enclosed structures, explore enclosed steel garages and open metal buildings. For agricultural use, see metal barns. For individual framing components, browse purlins, standing seam, insulated panels and roofing systems.

READY TO BUILD YOUR METAL BUILDING WITH CONFIDENCE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all metal building orders.

Get My Free Quote Call 1-877-275-7048

Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings For Sale

Filter Carports

50×80 Auto Repair Shop

50×80 Fleet Garage

40×100 Fabrication Shop

40×100 Commercial Warehouse

40×100 Auto Repair Shop

40×100 Fleet Garage

40×100 Retail Showroom

40×100 Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×100 Trucking / Service Terminal

50×80 Commercial Warehouse

50×80 Distribution / Fulfillment Building

50×80 Retail Showroom

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility

100×40 Fleet Garage

100×40 Auto Repair Shop

100×40 Commercial Garage

50×80 Community Hall or Event Space

40×100 Church & Event Hall

40×100 Municipal / Public Works Building

40×100 Worship / Fellowship Hall

50×80 Municipal / Public Works Building

50×80 Worship / Fellowship Hall

50×80 Fabrication Shop

50×80 Warehouse and Distribution

40×100 Warehouse

40×100 Workshop Kit

40×100 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

50×80 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

50×80 Service / Repair Shop

100×40 Fabrication Shop

100×40 Warehouse

100×40 Hobbyist Workshop

60×70 RV & Boat Storage

60×70 Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×80 4-Bed Barndominium

40×100 4-Bed Barndominium

50×60 Metal Building

60×70 Farm Equipment Building

60×70 Horse Barn / Riding Space

60×70 Commercial Warehouse

26×50 Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 Metal Carport (Open), built for daily backyard use.

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-cover layout.

Cover bay · Pillar zone · Approach apron

Build your 26×50 Metal Carport (Open) in 3D.

Everything in your Metal Carport (Open).

Metal Carport (Open) spec sheet.

How real buyers use Metal Carport (Open).

26×50 Metal Carport (Open), what makes it different.

Engineered for your county

Construction details

Free delivery & install, really free

Warranty & lifespan

$0-down financing

Why 26×50?

Common questions from Metal Carport (Open) shoppers.

What real 26×50 Metal Carport (Open) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 26×50 Metal Carport (Open)

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Complete your Metal Carport (Open) · Save 10% bundled

Buyers who chose Metal Carport (Open) also viewed:

Metal Garage (3 to 4 Cars)

Workshop / Hobby Space

Commercial Steel Building

RV Cover / Boat Storage

Home Gym / Studio

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

Man Cave / She Shed

Warehouse / Equipment Storage

Government / Institutional

Equestrian / Tack Building

Houses of Worship / Community Space

Recently viewed by you.

Metal Carport (Open) questions, answered.

Your Metal Carport (Open) quote takes one minute.

26×50 Metal Carport (Open)

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space

26×50 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.